1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 217 */ 218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 224 }; 225 226 /** 227 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 228 * 229 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 230 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 231 * 232 * @def: the channel definition 233 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 234 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 235 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 236 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 237 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 238 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 239 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 240 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 241 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 242 */ 243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 244 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 246 247 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 248 249 bool radar_enabled; 250 251 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 252 }; 253 254 /** 255 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 256 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 257 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 258 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 259 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 260 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 261 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 262 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 263 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 264 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 265 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 266 * for changes/removal.) 267 */ 268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 270 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 275 * 276 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 277 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 278 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 279 * done. 280 * 281 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 282 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 283 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 284 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 285 */ 286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 290 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 291 }; 292 293 /** 294 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 295 * 296 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 297 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 298 * 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 300 * also implies a change in the AID. 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 304 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 308 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 310 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 312 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 313 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 316 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 317 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 322 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 324 * changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 326 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 328 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 329 * context had been assigned. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 333 * keep alive) changed. 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 336 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 339 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 342 * status changed. 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_EHT_PUNCTURING: The channel puncturing bitmap changed. 344 */ 345 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 346 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 347 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 349 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 350 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 351 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 352 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 353 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 354 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 355 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 356 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 357 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 358 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 359 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 360 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 361 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 362 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 363 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 364 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 365 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 366 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 367 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 368 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 369 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 370 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 371 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 372 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 373 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 375 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 376 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 377 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 378 BSS_CHANGED_EHT_PUNCTURING = BIT_ULL(32), 379 380 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 381 }; 382 383 /* 384 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 385 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 386 * filtering will be disabled. 387 */ 388 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 389 390 /** 391 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 392 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 393 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 394 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 395 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 396 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 397 * once each time the timeout triggers. 398 */ 399 enum ieee80211_event_type { 400 RSSI_EVENT, 401 MLME_EVENT, 402 BAR_RX_EVENT, 403 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 404 }; 405 406 /** 407 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 408 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 409 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 410 */ 411 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 412 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 413 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 414 }; 415 416 /** 417 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 418 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 419 */ 420 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 421 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 422 }; 423 424 /** 425 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 426 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 427 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 428 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 429 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 430 */ 431 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 432 AUTH_EVENT, 433 ASSOC_EVENT, 434 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 435 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 436 }; 437 438 /** 439 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 440 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 441 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 442 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 443 */ 444 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 445 MLME_SUCCESS, 446 MLME_DENIED, 447 MLME_TIMEOUT, 448 }; 449 450 /** 451 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 452 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 453 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 454 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 455 */ 456 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 458 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 459 u16 reason; 460 }; 461 462 /** 463 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 464 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 465 * @tid: the tid 466 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 467 */ 468 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 469 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 470 u16 tid; 471 u16 ssn; 472 }; 473 474 /** 475 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 476 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 477 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 478 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 479 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 480 * @u:union holding the fields above 481 */ 482 struct ieee80211_event { 483 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 484 union { 485 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 486 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 487 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 488 } u; 489 }; 490 491 /** 492 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 493 * 494 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 495 * 496 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 497 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 498 */ 499 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 500 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 501 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 502 }; 503 504 /** 505 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 506 * 507 * @lci: LCI subelement content 508 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 509 * @lci_len: LCI data length 510 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 511 */ 512 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 513 const u8 *lci; 514 const u8 *civicloc; 515 size_t lci_len; 516 size_t civicloc_len; 517 }; 518 519 /** 520 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 521 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 522 * 523 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 524 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 525 */ 526 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 527 u32 min_interval; 528 u32 max_interval; 529 }; 530 531 /** 532 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 533 * 534 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 535 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 536 * 537 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 538 * @addr: (link) address used locally 539 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 540 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 541 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 542 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 543 * ACK, BACK or both 544 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 545 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 546 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 547 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 548 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 549 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 550 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 551 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 552 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 553 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 554 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 555 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 556 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 557 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 558 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 559 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 560 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 561 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 562 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 563 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 564 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 565 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 566 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 567 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 568 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 569 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 570 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 571 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 572 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 573 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 574 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 575 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 576 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 577 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 578 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 579 * the current band. 580 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 581 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 582 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 583 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 584 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 585 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 586 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 587 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 588 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 589 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 590 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 591 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 592 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 593 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 594 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 595 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 596 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 597 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 598 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 599 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 600 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 601 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 602 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 603 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 604 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 605 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 606 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 607 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 608 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 609 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 610 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 611 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 612 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 613 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 614 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 615 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 616 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 617 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 618 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 619 * station. 620 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 621 * responder functionality. 622 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 623 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 624 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 625 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 626 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 627 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 628 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 629 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 630 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 631 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 632 * connected to (STA) 633 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 634 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 635 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 636 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 637 * interval. 638 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 639 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 640 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 641 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS. 642 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env. 643 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 644 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 645 * @eht_puncturing: bitmap to indicate which channels are punctured in this BSS 646 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 647 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 648 * for read access. 649 * @csa_punct_bitmap: new puncturing bitmap for channel switch 650 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 651 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 652 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 653 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 654 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 655 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 656 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is 657 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 658 * for read access. 659 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 660 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 661 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 662 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 663 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 664 * beamformer 665 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 666 * beamformee 667 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 668 * beamformer 669 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 670 * beamformee 671 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 672 * beamformer 673 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 674 * beamformee 675 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 676 * beamformer 677 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 678 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 679 * bandwidth 680 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 681 * beamformer 682 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 683 * beamformee 684 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 685 * beamformer 686 */ 687 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 688 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 689 690 const u8 *bssid; 691 unsigned int link_id; 692 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 693 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 694 bool uora_exists; 695 u8 uora_ocw_range; 696 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 697 bool he_support; 698 bool twt_requester; 699 bool twt_responder; 700 bool twt_protected; 701 bool twt_broadcast; 702 /* erp related data */ 703 bool use_cts_prot; 704 bool use_short_preamble; 705 bool use_short_slot; 706 bool enable_beacon; 707 u8 dtim_period; 708 u16 beacon_int; 709 u16 assoc_capability; 710 u64 sync_tsf; 711 u32 sync_device_ts; 712 u8 sync_dtim_count; 713 u32 basic_rates; 714 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 715 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 716 u16 ht_operation_mode; 717 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 718 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 719 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 720 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 721 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 722 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 723 bool qos; 724 bool hidden_ssid; 725 int txpower; 726 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 727 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 728 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 729 u16 max_idle_period; 730 bool protected_keep_alive; 731 bool ftm_responder; 732 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 733 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 734 bool nontransmitted; 735 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 736 u8 bssid_index; 737 u8 bssid_indicator; 738 bool ema_ap; 739 u8 profile_periodicity; 740 struct { 741 u32 params; 742 u16 nss_set; 743 } he_oper; 744 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 745 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 746 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 747 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 748 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 749 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 750 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT]; 751 u8 tx_pwr_env_num; 752 u8 pwr_reduction; 753 bool eht_support; 754 u16 eht_puncturing; 755 756 bool csa_active; 757 u16 csa_punct_bitmap; 758 759 bool mu_mimo_owner; 760 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 761 762 bool color_change_active; 763 u8 color_change_color; 764 765 bool ht_ldpc; 766 bool vht_ldpc; 767 bool he_ldpc; 768 bool vht_su_beamformer; 769 bool vht_su_beamformee; 770 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 771 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 772 bool he_su_beamformer; 773 bool he_su_beamformee; 774 bool he_mu_beamformer; 775 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 776 bool eht_su_beamformer; 777 bool eht_su_beamformee; 778 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 779 }; 780 781 /** 782 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 783 * 784 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 785 * 786 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 787 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 788 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 789 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 790 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 791 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 792 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 793 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 794 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 795 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 796 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 797 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 798 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 800 * station 801 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 802 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 803 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 804 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 805 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 806 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 807 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 808 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 809 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 810 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 811 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 812 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 813 * hardware queue. 814 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 816 * is for the whole aggregation. 817 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 818 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 819 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 820 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 821 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 822 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 823 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 824 * off-channel operation. 825 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 826 * (header conversion) 827 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 828 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 829 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 830 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 831 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 832 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 833 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 834 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 835 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 836 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 837 * queue gets full. 838 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 839 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 840 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 841 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 842 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 843 * should kick the MLME state machine. 844 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 845 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 846 * status to user space) 847 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 849 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 851 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 852 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 853 * handled properly by the device. 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 855 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 856 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 858 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 859 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 861 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 862 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 863 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 864 * PS-Poll responses. 865 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 866 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 867 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 868 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 869 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 870 * monitor injection). 871 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 872 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 873 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 874 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 875 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 876 * 877 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 878 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 879 */ 880 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 881 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 883 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 884 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 885 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 887 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 888 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 889 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 890 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 891 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 892 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 893 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 894 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 895 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 896 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 897 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 898 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 899 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 900 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 901 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 902 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 903 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 904 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 905 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 906 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 907 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 908 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 909 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 910 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 911 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 912 }; 913 914 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 915 916 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 917 918 /** 919 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 920 * 921 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 922 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 923 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 924 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 925 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 926 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 927 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 928 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 929 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 930 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 931 * it can be sent out. 932 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 933 * has already been assigned to this frame. 934 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 935 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 936 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 937 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 938 * for sequence number assignment 939 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 940 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 941 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 942 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 943 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 944 * it's intended for an MLD. 945 * 946 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 947 */ 948 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 949 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 950 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 951 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 952 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 953 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 954 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 955 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 956 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 957 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 958 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 959 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 960 }; 961 962 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 963 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 964 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 965 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 966 967 /** 968 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 969 * 970 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 971 * 972 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 973 */ 974 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 975 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 976 }; 977 978 /* 979 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 980 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 981 */ 982 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 983 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 984 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 985 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 986 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 987 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 988 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 989 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 990 991 /** 992 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 993 * Rate Control algorithm. 994 * 995 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 996 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 997 * 998 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1000 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1002 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1003 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1004 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1006 * Greenfield mode. 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1008 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1009 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1010 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1011 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1012 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1013 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1014 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1015 */ 1016 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1017 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1018 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1019 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1020 1021 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1022 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1023 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1024 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1025 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1026 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1027 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1028 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1029 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1030 }; 1031 1032 1033 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1034 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1035 1036 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1037 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1038 1039 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1040 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1041 1042 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1043 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1044 1045 /** 1046 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1047 * 1048 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1049 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1050 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1051 * 1052 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1053 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1054 * 1055 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1056 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1057 * 1058 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1059 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1060 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1061 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1062 * information:: 1063 * 1064 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1065 * 1066 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1067 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1068 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1069 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1070 * information should then contain:: 1071 * 1072 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1073 * 1074 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1075 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1076 */ 1077 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1078 s8 idx; 1079 u16 count:5, 1080 flags:11; 1081 } __packed; 1082 1083 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1084 1085 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1086 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1087 { 1088 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1089 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1090 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1091 } 1092 1093 static inline u8 1094 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1095 { 1096 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1097 } 1098 1099 static inline u8 1100 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1101 { 1102 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1103 } 1104 1105 /** 1106 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1107 * 1108 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1109 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1110 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1111 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1112 * 1113 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1114 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1115 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1116 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1117 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1118 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1119 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1120 * @control: union part for control data 1121 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1122 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1123 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1124 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1125 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1126 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1127 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1128 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1129 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1130 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1131 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1132 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1133 * @pad: padding 1134 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1135 * @status: union part for status data 1136 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1137 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1138 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1139 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1140 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1141 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1142 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1143 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1144 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1145 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1146 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1147 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1148 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1149 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1150 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1151 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1152 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1153 */ 1154 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1155 /* common information */ 1156 u32 flags; 1157 u32 band:3, 1158 ack_frame_id:13, 1159 hw_queue:4, 1160 tx_time_est:10; 1161 /* 2 free bits */ 1162 1163 union { 1164 struct { 1165 union { 1166 /* rate control */ 1167 struct { 1168 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1169 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1170 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1171 u8 use_rts:1; 1172 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1173 u8 short_preamble:1; 1174 u8 skip_table:1; 1175 /* 2 bytes free */ 1176 }; 1177 /* only needed before rate control */ 1178 unsigned long jiffies; 1179 }; 1180 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1182 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1183 u32 flags; 1184 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1185 } control; 1186 struct { 1187 u64 cookie; 1188 } ack; 1189 struct { 1190 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1191 s32 ack_signal; 1192 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1193 u8 ampdu_len; 1194 u8 antenna; 1195 u16 tx_time; 1196 u8 flags; 1197 void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)]; 1198 } status; 1199 struct { 1200 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1201 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1202 u8 pad[4]; 1203 1204 void *rate_driver_data[ 1205 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1206 }; 1207 void *driver_data[ 1208 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1209 }; 1210 }; 1211 1212 static inline u16 1213 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1214 { 1215 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1216 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1217 */ 1218 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1219 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1220 } 1221 1222 static inline u16 1223 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1224 { 1225 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1226 } 1227 1228 /*** 1229 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1230 * 1231 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1232 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1233 * 1234 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1235 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1236 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1237 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1238 * that was used when sending the packet. 1239 */ 1240 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1241 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1242 u8 try_count; 1243 u8 tx_power_idx; 1244 }; 1245 1246 /** 1247 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1248 * 1249 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1250 * @info: Basic tx status information 1251 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1252 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1253 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1254 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1255 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1256 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1257 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1258 */ 1259 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1260 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1261 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1262 struct sk_buff *skb; 1263 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1264 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1265 u8 n_rates; 1266 1267 struct list_head *free_list; 1268 }; 1269 1270 /** 1271 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1272 * 1273 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1274 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1275 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1276 * 1277 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1278 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1279 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1280 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1281 */ 1282 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1283 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1284 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1285 const u8 *common_ies; 1286 size_t common_ie_len; 1287 }; 1288 1289 1290 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1291 { 1292 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1293 } 1294 1295 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1296 { 1297 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1298 } 1299 1300 /** 1301 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1302 * 1303 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1304 * 1305 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1306 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1307 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1308 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1309 * 1310 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1311 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1312 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1313 */ 1314 static inline void 1315 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1316 { 1317 int i; 1318 1319 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1320 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1321 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1322 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1323 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1324 /* clear the rate counts */ 1325 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1326 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1327 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1328 } 1329 1330 1331 /** 1332 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1333 * 1334 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1335 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1336 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1337 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1338 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1339 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1340 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1341 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1342 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1343 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1344 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1345 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1346 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1347 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1348 * de-duplication by itself. 1349 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1350 * the frame. 1351 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1352 * the frame. 1353 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1354 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1355 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1356 * merging. 1357 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1358 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1359 * (including FCS) was received. 1360 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1361 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1362 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1363 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1364 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1365 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1366 * each A-MPDU 1367 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1368 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1369 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1370 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1371 * on this subframe 1372 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1373 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1374 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1375 * done by the hardware 1376 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1377 * processing it in any regular way. 1378 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1379 * them for sniffing purposes. 1380 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1381 * monitor interfaces. 1382 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1383 * them for sniffing purposes. 1384 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1385 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1386 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1387 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1388 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1389 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1390 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1391 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1392 * interleaved with other frames. 1393 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1394 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1395 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1396 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1397 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1398 * in the skb. 1399 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1400 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1401 * the first subframe. 1402 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1403 * be done in the hardware. 1404 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1405 * frame 1406 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1407 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1408 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1409 * 1410 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1411 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1412 * - DATA3_CODING 1413 * - DATA5_GI 1414 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1415 * - DATA6_NSTS 1416 * - DATA3_STBC 1417 * 1418 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1419 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1420 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1421 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1422 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1423 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1424 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1425 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1426 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1427 * hardware or driver) 1428 */ 1429 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1430 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1431 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1432 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1433 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1434 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1435 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1436 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1437 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1438 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1439 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1440 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1441 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1442 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1443 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1444 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1445 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1446 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1447 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1448 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1449 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1450 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1451 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1452 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1453 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1454 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1455 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1456 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1457 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1458 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1459 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1460 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1461 }; 1462 1463 /** 1464 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1465 * 1466 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1467 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1468 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1469 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1470 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1471 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1472 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1473 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1474 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1475 */ 1476 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1477 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1478 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1479 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1480 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1481 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1482 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1483 }; 1484 1485 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1486 1487 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1488 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1489 RX_ENC_HT, 1490 RX_ENC_VHT, 1491 RX_ENC_HE, 1492 RX_ENC_EHT, 1493 }; 1494 1495 /** 1496 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1497 * 1498 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1499 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1500 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1501 * 1502 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1503 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1504 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1505 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1506 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1507 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1508 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1509 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1510 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1511 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1512 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1513 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1514 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1515 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1516 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1517 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1518 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1519 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1520 * values were filled. 1521 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1522 * support dB or unspecified units) 1523 * @antenna: antenna used 1524 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1525 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1526 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only) 1527 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1528 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1529 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1530 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1531 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1532 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1533 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1534 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1535 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1536 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1537 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1538 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1539 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1540 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1541 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1542 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1543 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1544 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1545 * @link_valid. 1546 */ 1547 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1548 u64 mactime; 1549 union { 1550 u64 boottime_ns; 1551 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1552 }; 1553 u32 device_timestamp; 1554 u32 ampdu_reference; 1555 u32 flag; 1556 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1557 u8 enc_flags; 1558 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1559 union { 1560 struct { 1561 u8 he_ru:3; 1562 u8 he_gi:2; 1563 u8 he_dcm:1; 1564 }; 1565 struct { 1566 u8 ru:4; 1567 u8 gi:2; 1568 } eht; 1569 }; 1570 u8 rate_idx; 1571 u8 nss; 1572 u8 rx_flags; 1573 u8 band; 1574 u8 antenna; 1575 s8 signal; 1576 u8 chains; 1577 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1578 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1579 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1580 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1581 }; 1582 1583 static inline u32 1584 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1585 { 1586 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1587 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1588 } 1589 1590 /** 1591 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1592 * 1593 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1594 * 1595 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1596 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1597 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1598 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1599 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1600 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1601 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1602 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1603 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1604 * for more. 1605 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1606 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1607 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1608 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1609 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1610 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1611 * operating channel. 1612 */ 1613 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1614 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1615 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1616 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1617 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1618 }; 1619 1620 1621 /** 1622 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1623 * 1624 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1625 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1626 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1627 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1628 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1629 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1630 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1631 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1632 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1633 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1634 */ 1635 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1636 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1637 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1638 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1639 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1640 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1641 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1642 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1643 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1644 }; 1645 1646 /** 1647 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1648 * 1649 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1650 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1651 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1652 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1653 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1654 */ 1655 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1656 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1657 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1658 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1659 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1660 1661 /* keep last */ 1662 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1663 }; 1664 1665 /** 1666 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1667 * 1668 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1669 * 1670 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1671 * 1672 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1673 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1674 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1675 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1676 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1677 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1678 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1679 * 1680 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1681 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1682 * 1683 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1684 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1685 * 1686 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1687 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1688 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1689 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1690 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1691 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1692 * 1693 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1694 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1695 * configured for an HT channel. 1696 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1697 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1698 */ 1699 struct ieee80211_conf { 1700 u32 flags; 1701 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1702 1703 u16 listen_interval; 1704 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1705 1706 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1707 1708 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1709 bool radar_enabled; 1710 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1711 }; 1712 1713 /** 1714 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1715 * 1716 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1717 * operation. 1718 * 1719 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1720 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1721 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1722 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1723 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1724 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1725 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1726 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1727 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1728 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1729 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1730 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1731 * channel, expressed in TU. 1732 */ 1733 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1734 u64 timestamp; 1735 u32 device_timestamp; 1736 bool block_tx; 1737 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1738 u8 count; 1739 u32 delay; 1740 }; 1741 1742 /** 1743 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1744 * 1745 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1746 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1747 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1748 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1749 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1750 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1751 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1752 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1753 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1754 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1755 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1756 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1757 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1758 */ 1759 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1760 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1761 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1762 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1763 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1764 }; 1765 1766 1767 /** 1768 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1769 * 1770 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1771 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1772 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1773 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1774 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1775 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1776 * mac80211. 1777 */ 1778 1779 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1780 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1781 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1782 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1783 }; 1784 1785 /** 1786 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1787 * @assoc: association status 1788 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1789 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1790 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1791 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1792 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1793 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1794 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1795 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1796 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1797 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1798 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1799 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1800 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1801 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1802 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1803 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1804 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1805 * your driver/device needs to do. 1806 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1807 * (station mode only) 1808 */ 1809 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1810 /* association related data */ 1811 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1812 bool ibss_creator; 1813 bool ps; 1814 u16 aid; 1815 1816 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1817 int arp_addr_cnt; 1818 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1819 size_t ssid_len; 1820 bool s1g; 1821 bool idle; 1822 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1823 }; 1824 1825 /** 1826 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1827 * 1828 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1829 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1830 * 1831 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1832 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1833 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1834 * or the BSS we're associated to 1835 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1836 * indexed by link ID 1837 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1838 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1839 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1840 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1841 * @addr: address of this interface 1842 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1843 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1844 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1845 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 1846 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 1847 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 1848 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1849 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1850 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1851 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1852 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1853 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1854 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1855 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1856 * restrictions. 1857 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1858 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1859 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1860 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1861 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1862 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1863 * interface. 1864 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1865 * for this interface. 1866 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1867 * sizeof(void \*). 1868 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 1869 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1870 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1871 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 1872 */ 1873 struct ieee80211_vif { 1874 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1875 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 1876 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1877 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 1878 u16 valid_links, active_links; 1879 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1880 bool p2p; 1881 1882 u8 cab_queue; 1883 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1884 1885 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1886 1887 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 1888 u32 driver_flags; 1889 u32 offload_flags; 1890 1891 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1892 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1893 #endif 1894 1895 bool probe_req_reg; 1896 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1897 1898 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 1899 1900 /* must be last */ 1901 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1902 }; 1903 1904 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 1905 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 1906 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 1907 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 1908 (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id]))) 1909 1910 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1911 { 1912 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1913 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1914 #endif 1915 return false; 1916 } 1917 1918 /** 1919 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1920 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1921 * 1922 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1923 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1924 * 1925 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1926 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1927 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1928 */ 1929 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1930 1931 /** 1932 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1933 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1934 * 1935 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1936 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1937 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 1938 */ 1939 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1940 1941 /** 1942 * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners 1943 * @vif: the interface to check 1944 */ 1945 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1946 { 1947 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx); 1948 } 1949 1950 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 1951 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1952 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1953 1954 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 1955 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1956 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1957 1958 /** 1959 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1960 * 1961 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1962 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1963 * 1964 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1965 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1966 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1967 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1968 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1969 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1970 * generation in software. 1971 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1972 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1973 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1974 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1975 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1976 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1977 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1978 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1979 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1980 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1981 * MIC. 1982 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1983 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1984 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1985 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1986 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1987 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1988 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1989 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1990 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1991 * only for management frames (MFP). 1992 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1993 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1994 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1995 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1996 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1997 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1998 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1999 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2000 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 2001 * generation only 2002 */ 2003 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2004 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2005 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2006 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2007 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2008 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2009 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2010 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2011 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2012 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2013 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2014 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2015 }; 2016 2017 /** 2018 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2019 * 2020 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2021 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2022 * 2023 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2024 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2025 * encrypted in hardware. 2026 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2027 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2028 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2029 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2030 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 2031 * @keylen: key material length 2032 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2033 * data block: 2034 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2035 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2036 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2037 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2038 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2039 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2040 */ 2041 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2042 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2043 u32 cipher; 2044 u8 icv_len; 2045 u8 iv_len; 2046 u8 hw_key_idx; 2047 s8 keyidx; 2048 u16 flags; 2049 s8 link_id; 2050 u8 keylen; 2051 u8 key[]; 2052 }; 2053 2054 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2055 2056 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2057 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2058 2059 /** 2060 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2061 * 2062 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2063 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2064 * reverse order than in packet) 2065 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2066 * reverse order than in packet) 2067 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2068 * reverse order than in packet) 2069 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2070 * reverse order than in packet) 2071 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2072 */ 2073 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2074 union { 2075 struct { 2076 u32 iv32; 2077 u16 iv16; 2078 } tkip; 2079 struct { 2080 u8 pn[6]; 2081 } ccmp; 2082 struct { 2083 u8 pn[6]; 2084 } aes_cmac; 2085 struct { 2086 u8 pn[6]; 2087 } aes_gmac; 2088 struct { 2089 u8 pn[6]; 2090 } gcmp; 2091 struct { 2092 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2093 u8 seq_len; 2094 } hw; 2095 }; 2096 }; 2097 2098 /** 2099 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2100 * 2101 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2102 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2103 * 2104 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2105 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2106 */ 2107 enum set_key_cmd { 2108 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2109 }; 2110 2111 /** 2112 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2113 * 2114 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2115 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2116 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2117 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2118 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2119 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2120 */ 2121 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2122 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2123 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2124 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2125 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2126 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2127 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2128 }; 2129 2130 /** 2131 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2132 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2133 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2134 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2135 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2136 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2137 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2138 * 2139 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2140 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2141 */ 2142 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2143 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2144 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2145 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2146 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2147 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2148 }; 2149 2150 /** 2151 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2152 * 2153 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2154 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2155 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2156 */ 2157 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2158 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2159 struct { 2160 s8 idx; 2161 u8 count; 2162 u8 count_cts; 2163 u8 count_rts; 2164 u16 flags; 2165 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2166 }; 2167 2168 /** 2169 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2170 * 2171 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2172 * 2173 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2174 * to the STA. 2175 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2176 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2177 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2178 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2179 * per peer TPC. 2180 */ 2181 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2182 s16 power; 2183 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2184 }; 2185 2186 /** 2187 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2188 * 2189 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2190 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2191 * 2192 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2193 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2194 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2195 * 2196 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2197 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2198 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2199 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2200 * 2201 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2202 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2203 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2204 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2205 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2206 */ 2207 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2208 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2209 2210 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2211 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2212 }; 2213 2214 /** 2215 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2216 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2217 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2218 * 2219 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2220 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2221 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2222 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2223 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2224 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2225 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2226 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2227 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2228 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2229 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2230 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2231 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2232 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2233 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2234 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2235 * the station moves to associated state. 2236 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2237 * 2238 */ 2239 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2240 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2241 2242 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2243 u8 link_id; 2244 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2245 2246 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2247 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2248 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2249 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2250 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2251 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2252 2253 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2254 2255 u8 rx_nss; 2256 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2257 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2258 }; 2259 2260 /** 2261 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2262 * 2263 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2264 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2265 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2266 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2267 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2268 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2269 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2270 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2271 * 2272 * @addr: MAC address 2273 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2274 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2275 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2276 * Can be modified by driver. 2277 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2278 * otherwise always false) 2279 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2280 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2281 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2282 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2283 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2284 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2285 * @rates: rate control selection table 2286 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2287 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2288 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2289 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2290 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2291 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2292 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2293 * unlimited. 2294 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2295 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2296 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2297 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2298 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2299 * is used for non-data frames 2300 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2301 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2302 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2303 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2304 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2305 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2306 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2307 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2308 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2309 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2310 * by the AP. 2311 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2312 */ 2313 struct ieee80211_sta { 2314 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2315 u16 aid; 2316 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2317 bool wme; 2318 u8 uapsd_queues; 2319 u8 max_sp; 2320 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2321 bool tdls; 2322 bool tdls_initiator; 2323 bool mfp; 2324 bool mlo; 2325 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2326 2327 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2328 2329 bool support_p2p_ps; 2330 2331 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2332 2333 u16 valid_links; 2334 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2335 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2336 2337 /* must be last */ 2338 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2339 }; 2340 2341 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2342 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2343 #else 2344 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2345 { 2346 return true; 2347 } 2348 #endif 2349 2350 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2351 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2352 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2353 2354 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2355 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2356 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2357 2358 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2359 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2360 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2361 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2362 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id))) 2363 2364 /** 2365 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2366 * 2367 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2368 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2369 * 2370 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2371 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2372 */ 2373 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2374 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2375 }; 2376 2377 /** 2378 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2379 * 2380 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2381 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2382 */ 2383 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2384 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2385 }; 2386 2387 /** 2388 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2389 * 2390 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2391 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2392 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2393 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2394 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2395 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2396 * 2397 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2398 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2399 */ 2400 struct ieee80211_txq { 2401 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2402 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2403 u8 tid; 2404 u8 ac; 2405 2406 /* must be last */ 2407 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2408 }; 2409 2410 /** 2411 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2412 * 2413 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2414 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2415 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2416 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2417 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2418 * 2419 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2420 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2421 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2422 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2423 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2424 * algorithm. 2425 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2426 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2427 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2428 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2429 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2430 * CCK frames. 2431 * 2432 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2433 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2434 * the FCS at the end. 2435 * 2436 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2437 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2438 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2439 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2440 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2441 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2442 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2443 * 2444 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2445 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2446 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2447 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2448 * 2449 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2450 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2451 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2452 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2453 * 2454 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2455 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2456 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2457 * 2458 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2459 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2460 * 2461 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2462 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2463 * 2464 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2465 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2466 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2467 * 2468 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2469 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2470 * 2471 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2472 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2473 * 2474 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2475 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2476 * the stack. 2477 * 2478 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2479 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2480 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2481 * 2482 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2483 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2484 * dtim_period). 2485 * 2486 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2487 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2488 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2489 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2490 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2491 * only in that case. 2492 * 2493 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2494 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2495 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2496 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2497 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2498 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2499 * 2500 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2501 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2502 * software. 2503 * 2504 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2505 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2506 * active interfaces. 2507 * 2508 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2509 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2510 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2511 * 2512 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2513 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2514 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2515 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2516 * supported cipher suites. 2517 * 2518 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2519 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2520 * for frames. 2521 * 2522 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2523 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2524 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2525 * control for more details. 2526 * 2527 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2528 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2529 * 2530 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2531 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2532 * is supported. 2533 * 2534 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2535 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2536 * 2537 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2538 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2539 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2540 * 2541 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2542 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2543 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2544 * CSA frame. 2545 * 2546 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2547 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2548 * 2549 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2550 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2551 * 2552 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2553 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2554 * 2555 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2556 * within A-MPDU. 2557 * 2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2559 * for sent beacons. 2560 * 2561 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2562 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2563 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2564 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2565 * 2566 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2567 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2568 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2569 * timeout. 2570 * 2571 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2572 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2573 * 2574 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2575 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2576 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2577 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2578 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2579 * 2580 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2581 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2582 * 2583 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2584 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2585 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2586 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2587 * 2588 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2589 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2590 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2591 * 2592 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2593 * TDLS links. 2594 * 2595 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2596 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2597 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2598 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2599 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2600 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2601 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2602 * 2603 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2604 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2605 * 2606 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2607 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2608 * 2609 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2610 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2611 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2612 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2613 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2614 * 2615 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2616 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2617 * TXQs to start with. 2618 * 2619 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2620 * length in tx status information 2621 * 2622 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2623 * 2624 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2625 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2626 * 2627 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2628 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2629 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2630 * 2631 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2632 * offload 2633 * 2634 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2635 * offload 2636 * 2637 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2638 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2639 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2640 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2641 * the stack. 2642 * 2643 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2644 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2645 * 2646 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2647 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2648 * 2649 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2650 */ 2651 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2652 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2653 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2654 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2655 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2656 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2657 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2658 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2659 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2660 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2661 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2662 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2663 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2664 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2665 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2666 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2667 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2668 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2669 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2670 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2671 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2672 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2673 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2674 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2675 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2676 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2677 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2678 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2679 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2680 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2681 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2682 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2683 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2684 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2685 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2686 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2687 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2688 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2689 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2690 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2691 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2692 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2693 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2694 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2695 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2696 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2697 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2698 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2699 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2700 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2701 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2702 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2703 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2704 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2705 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2706 2707 /* keep last, obviously */ 2708 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2709 }; 2710 2711 /** 2712 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2713 * 2714 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2715 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2716 * 2717 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2718 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2719 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2720 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2721 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2722 * 2723 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2724 * 2725 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2726 * along with this structure. 2727 * 2728 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2729 * 2730 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2731 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2732 * 2733 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2734 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2735 * 2736 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2737 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2738 * 2739 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2740 * that HW supports 2741 * 2742 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2743 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2744 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2745 * 2746 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2747 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2748 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2749 * 2750 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2751 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2752 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2753 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2754 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2755 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2756 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2757 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2758 * 2759 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2760 * can handle. 2761 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2762 * the hw can report back. 2763 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2764 * 2765 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2766 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2767 * aggregation. 2768 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2769 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2770 * it shouldn't be set. 2771 * 2772 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2773 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2774 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2775 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2776 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2777 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2778 * 2779 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2780 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2781 * 2782 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2783 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2784 * 2785 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2786 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2787 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2788 * adding _BW is supported today. 2789 * 2790 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2791 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2792 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2793 * 2794 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2795 * 2796 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2797 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2798 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2799 * device_timestamp. 2800 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2801 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2802 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2803 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2804 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2805 * 2806 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2807 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2808 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2809 * 2810 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2811 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2812 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2813 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2814 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2815 * neither enabled. 2816 * 2817 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2818 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2819 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2820 * 2821 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2822 * device. 2823 * 2824 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2825 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2826 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2827 * 2828 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2829 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2830 * 2831 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2832 * 2833 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 2834 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 2835 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 2836 * 2837 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 2838 */ 2839 struct ieee80211_hw { 2840 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2841 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2842 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2843 void *priv; 2844 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2845 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2846 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2847 int vif_data_size; 2848 int sta_data_size; 2849 int chanctx_data_size; 2850 int txq_data_size; 2851 u16 queues; 2852 u16 max_listen_interval; 2853 s8 max_signal; 2854 u8 max_rates; 2855 u8 max_report_rates; 2856 u8 max_rate_tries; 2857 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2858 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2859 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2860 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2861 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2862 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2863 struct { 2864 int units_pos; 2865 s16 accuracy; 2866 } radiotap_timestamp; 2867 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2868 u8 uapsd_queues; 2869 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2870 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2871 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2872 u8 weight_multiplier; 2873 u32 max_mtu; 2874 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 2875 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 2876 }; 2877 2878 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2879 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2880 { 2881 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2882 } 2883 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2884 2885 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2886 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2887 { 2888 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2889 } 2890 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2891 2892 /** 2893 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2894 * 2895 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2896 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2897 */ 2898 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2899 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2900 2901 /* Keep last */ 2902 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2903 }; 2904 2905 /** 2906 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2907 * 2908 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2909 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2910 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2911 * @status: channel-switch response status 2912 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2913 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2914 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2915 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2916 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2917 */ 2918 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2919 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2920 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2921 u8 action_code; 2922 u32 status; 2923 u32 timestamp; 2924 u16 switch_time; 2925 u16 switch_timeout; 2926 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2927 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2928 }; 2929 2930 /** 2931 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2932 * 2933 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2934 * 2935 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2936 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2937 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2938 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2939 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2940 * 2941 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2942 */ 2943 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2944 2945 /** 2946 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2947 * 2948 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2949 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2950 */ 2951 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2952 { 2953 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2954 } 2955 2956 /** 2957 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2958 * 2959 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2960 * @addr: the address to set 2961 */ 2962 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2963 { 2964 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2965 } 2966 2967 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2968 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2969 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2970 { 2971 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2972 return NULL; 2973 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2974 } 2975 2976 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2977 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2978 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2979 { 2980 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2981 return NULL; 2982 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2983 } 2984 2985 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2986 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2987 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2988 { 2989 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2990 return NULL; 2991 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2992 } 2993 2994 /** 2995 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2996 * @hw: the hardware 2997 * @skb: the skb 2998 * 2999 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3000 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3001 */ 3002 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3003 3004 /** 3005 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3006 * 3007 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3008 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3009 * 3010 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3011 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3012 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3013 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3014 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3015 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3016 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3017 * 3018 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3019 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3020 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3021 * 3022 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3023 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3024 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3025 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 3026 * 3027 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3028 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3029 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3030 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3031 * 3032 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3033 * 3034 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3035 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 3036 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3037 * based on the receive flags. 3038 * 3039 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3040 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3041 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3042 * keys. 3043 * 3044 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3045 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3046 * handler. 3047 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3048 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3049 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3050 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3051 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3052 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3053 * 3054 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3055 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3056 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3057 * 3058 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3059 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3060 * requirements: 3061 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3062 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3063 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3064 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3065 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3066 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3067 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3068 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3069 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3070 */ 3071 3072 /** 3073 * DOC: Powersave support 3074 * 3075 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3076 * 3077 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 3078 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3079 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3080 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3081 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3082 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3083 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3084 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3085 * 3086 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3087 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3088 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3089 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3090 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3091 * 3092 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3093 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3094 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3095 * 3096 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3097 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3098 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3099 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3100 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3101 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3102 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3103 * 3104 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3105 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3106 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3107 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 3108 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3109 * periods. 3110 * 3111 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3112 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3113 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3114 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3115 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3116 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3117 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3118 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3119 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3120 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3121 * 3122 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3123 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3124 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3125 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3126 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3127 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3128 * 3129 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3130 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3131 */ 3132 3133 /** 3134 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3135 * 3136 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3137 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3138 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3139 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3140 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3141 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3142 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3143 * 3144 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3145 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3146 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3147 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3148 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3149 * 3150 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3151 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3152 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3153 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3154 * 3155 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3156 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3157 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3158 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3159 * 3160 * - a list of information element IDs 3161 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3162 * 3163 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3164 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3165 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3166 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3167 * vendor information elements. 3168 * 3169 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3170 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3171 * 3172 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 3173 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3174 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3175 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3176 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3177 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3178 * 3179 * 3180 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3181 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3182 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3183 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 3184 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3185 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3186 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3187 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3188 * 3189 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3190 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3191 * signal strength threshold checking. 3192 */ 3193 3194 /** 3195 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3196 * 3197 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3198 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3199 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3200 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3201 * 3202 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3203 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3204 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3205 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3206 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3207 * hardware flags. 3208 * 3209 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3210 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3211 * turned off otherwise. 3212 * 3213 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3214 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3215 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3216 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3217 */ 3218 3219 /** 3220 * DOC: Frame filtering 3221 * 3222 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3223 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3224 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3225 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3226 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3227 * 3228 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3229 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3230 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3231 * 3232 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3233 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3234 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3235 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3236 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3237 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3238 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3239 * 3240 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3241 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3242 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3243 * or dropped. 3244 * 3245 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3246 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3247 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3248 * the flag, but not clear it. 3249 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3250 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3251 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3252 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3253 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3254 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3255 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3256 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3257 */ 3258 3259 /** 3260 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3261 * 3262 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3263 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3264 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3265 * 3266 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3267 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3268 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3269 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3270 * the driver code. 3271 * 3272 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3273 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3274 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3275 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3276 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3277 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3278 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3279 * 3280 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3281 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3282 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3283 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3284 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3285 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3286 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3287 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3288 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3289 * @sta_notify callback. 3290 * 3291 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3292 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3293 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3294 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3295 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3296 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3297 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3298 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3299 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3300 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3301 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3302 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3303 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3304 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3305 * 3306 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3307 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3308 * 3309 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3310 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3311 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3312 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3313 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3314 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3315 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3316 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3317 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3318 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3319 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3320 * 3321 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3322 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3323 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3324 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3325 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3326 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3327 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3328 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3329 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3330 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3331 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3332 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3333 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3334 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3335 * 3336 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3337 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3338 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3339 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3340 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3341 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3342 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3343 * 3344 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3345 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3346 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3347 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3348 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3349 * 3350 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3351 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3352 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3353 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3354 */ 3355 3356 /** 3357 * DOC: HW queue control 3358 * 3359 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3360 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3361 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3362 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3363 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3364 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3365 * 3366 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3367 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3368 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3369 * 3370 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3371 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3372 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3373 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3374 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3375 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3376 * the hardware queue. 3377 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3378 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3379 * 3380 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3381 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3382 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3383 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3384 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3385 * 3386 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3387 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3388 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3389 * off-channel queue: 9 3390 * 3391 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3392 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3393 * 3394 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3395 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3396 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3397 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3398 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3399 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3400 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3401 * 3402 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3403 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3404 * 3405 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3406 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3407 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3408 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3409 */ 3410 3411 /** 3412 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3413 * 3414 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3415 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3416 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3417 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3418 * 3419 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3420 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3421 * multicast address. 3422 * 3423 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3424 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3425 * 3426 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3427 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3428 * 3429 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3430 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3431 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3432 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3433 * honour this flag if possible. 3434 * 3435 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3436 * station 3437 * 3438 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3439 * 3440 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3441 * 3442 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3443 * 3444 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3445 */ 3446 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3447 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3448 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3449 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3450 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3451 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3452 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3453 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3454 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3455 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3456 }; 3457 3458 /** 3459 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3460 * 3461 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3462 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3463 * 3464 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3465 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3466 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3467 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3468 * 3469 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3470 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3471 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3472 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3473 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3474 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3475 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3476 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3477 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3478 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3479 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3480 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3481 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3482 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3483 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3484 * session is gone and removes the station. 3485 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3486 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3487 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3488 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3489 */ 3490 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3491 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3492 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3493 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3494 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3495 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3496 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3497 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3498 }; 3499 3500 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3501 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3502 3503 /** 3504 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3505 * 3506 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3507 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3508 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3509 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3510 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3511 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3512 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3513 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3514 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3515 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3516 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3517 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3518 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3519 */ 3520 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3521 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3522 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3523 u16 tid; 3524 u16 ssn; 3525 u16 buf_size; 3526 bool amsdu; 3527 u16 timeout; 3528 }; 3529 3530 /** 3531 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3532 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3533 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3534 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3535 */ 3536 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3537 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3538 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3539 }; 3540 3541 /** 3542 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3543 * 3544 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3545 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3546 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3547 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3548 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3549 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3550 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3551 * the peer. 3552 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3553 * by the peer 3554 */ 3555 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3556 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3557 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3558 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3559 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3560 }; 3561 3562 /** 3563 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3564 * 3565 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3566 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3567 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3568 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3569 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3570 * 3571 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3572 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3573 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3574 */ 3575 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3576 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3577 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3578 }; 3579 3580 /** 3581 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3582 * 3583 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3584 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3585 * 3586 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3587 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3588 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3589 * of wowlan configuration) 3590 */ 3591 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3592 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3593 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3594 }; 3595 3596 /** 3597 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3598 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3599 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3600 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3601 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3602 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3603 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3604 */ 3605 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3606 u16 duration; 3607 u16 subtype; 3608 u8 success:1; 3609 }; 3610 3611 /** 3612 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3613 * 3614 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3615 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3616 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3617 * 3618 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3619 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3620 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3621 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3622 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3623 * Must be atomic. 3624 * 3625 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3626 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3627 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3628 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3629 * or zero. 3630 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3631 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3632 * is added. 3633 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3634 * 3635 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3636 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3637 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3638 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3639 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3640 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3641 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3642 * 3643 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3644 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3645 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3646 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3647 * reconfigured at resume time. 3648 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3649 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3650 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3651 * must return 1 from this function. 3652 * 3653 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3654 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3655 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3656 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3657 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3658 * 3659 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3660 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3661 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3662 * in suspend(). 3663 * 3664 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3665 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3666 * and @stop must be implemented. 3667 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3668 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3669 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3670 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3671 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3672 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3673 * 3674 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3675 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3676 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3677 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3678 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3679 * 3680 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3681 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3682 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3683 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3684 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3685 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3686 * MAC address of the device going away. 3687 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3688 * 3689 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3690 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3691 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3692 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3693 * 3694 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3695 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3696 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3697 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3698 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3699 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3700 * can sleep. 3701 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3702 * are not implemented. 3703 * 3704 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3705 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3706 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3707 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3708 * The callback can sleep. 3709 * 3710 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3711 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3712 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3713 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3714 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3715 * non-MLO connections. 3716 * The callback can sleep. 3717 * 3718 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3719 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3720 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3721 * 3722 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3723 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3724 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3725 * 3726 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3727 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3728 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3729 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3730 * which flags are changed. 3731 * This callback can sleep. 3732 * 3733 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3734 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3735 * 3736 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3737 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3738 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3739 * is enabled. 3740 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3741 * The callback can sleep. 3742 * 3743 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3744 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3745 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3746 * The callback must be atomic. 3747 * 3748 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3749 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3750 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3751 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3752 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3753 * 3754 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3755 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3756 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3757 * 3758 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3759 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3760 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3761 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3762 * that power save is disabled. 3763 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3764 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3765 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3766 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3767 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3768 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3769 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3770 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3771 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3772 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3773 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3774 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3775 * The callback can sleep. 3776 * 3777 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3778 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3779 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3780 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3781 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3782 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3783 * The callback can sleep. 3784 * 3785 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3786 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3787 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3788 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3789 * 3790 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3791 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3792 * 3793 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3794 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3795 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3796 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3797 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3798 * 3799 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3800 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3801 * this notification. 3802 * The callback can sleep. 3803 * 3804 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3805 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3806 * The callback can sleep. 3807 * 3808 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3809 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3810 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3811 * The callback must be atomic. 3812 * 3813 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3814 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3815 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3816 * should be set as well. 3817 * The callback can sleep. 3818 * 3819 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3820 * The callback can sleep. 3821 * 3822 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3823 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3824 * 3825 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3826 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3827 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3828 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3829 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3830 * This callback can sleep. 3831 * 3832 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3833 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 3834 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 3835 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 3836 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 3837 * 3838 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3839 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3840 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3841 * callback can sleep. 3842 * 3843 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3844 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 3845 * should be within a CPTCFG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3846 * callback can sleep. 3847 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 3848 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 3849 * 3850 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3851 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3852 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3853 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3854 * 3855 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3856 * power for the station. 3857 * This callback can sleep. 3858 * 3859 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3860 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3861 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3862 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3863 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3864 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3865 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3866 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3867 * The callback can sleep. 3868 * 3869 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3870 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3871 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3872 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3873 * in @sta_state. 3874 * The callback can sleep. 3875 * 3876 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3877 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3878 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3879 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3880 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3881 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3882 * Must be atomic. 3883 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3884 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3885 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3886 * 3887 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3888 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3889 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3890 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3891 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3892 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3893 * The callback can sleep. 3894 * 3895 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3896 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3897 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3898 * The callback can sleep. 3899 * 3900 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3901 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3902 * required function. 3903 * The callback can sleep. 3904 * 3905 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3906 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3907 * required function. 3908 * The callback can sleep. 3909 * 3910 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3911 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3912 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3913 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3914 * The callback can sleep. 3915 * 3916 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3917 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3918 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3919 * TSF synchronization. 3920 * The callback can sleep. 3921 * 3922 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3923 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3924 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3925 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3926 * The callback can sleep. 3927 * 3928 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3929 * 3930 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3931 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3932 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3933 * The callback can sleep. 3934 * 3935 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3936 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3937 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3938 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3939 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3940 * 3941 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3942 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3943 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3944 * 3945 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3946 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3947 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3948 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3949 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3950 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3951 * The callback can sleep. 3952 * 3953 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 3954 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 3955 * The callback can sleep. 3956 * 3957 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3958 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3959 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3960 * completion of the channel switch. 3961 * 3962 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3963 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3964 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3965 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3966 * 3967 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3968 * 3969 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3970 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3971 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3972 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3973 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3974 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3975 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3976 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3977 * must be accepted in this case. 3978 * This callback may sleep. 3979 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3980 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3981 * 3982 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3983 * 3984 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3985 * 3986 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3987 * queues before entering power save. 3988 * 3989 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3990 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3991 * The callback can sleep. 3992 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3993 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3994 * The callback must be atomic. 3995 * 3996 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3997 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3998 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3999 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4000 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4001 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4002 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4003 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4004 * more-data bit must always be set. 4005 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4006 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4007 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4008 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4009 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4010 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4011 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4012 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4013 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4014 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4015 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4016 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4017 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4018 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4019 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4020 * This callback must be atomic. 4021 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4022 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4023 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4024 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4025 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4026 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4027 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4028 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4029 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4030 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4031 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4032 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4033 * This callback must be atomic. 4034 * 4035 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4036 * 4037 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4038 * 4039 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4040 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4041 * 4042 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4043 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4044 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4045 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4046 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4047 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4048 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 4049 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 4050 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 4051 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 4052 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 4053 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 4054 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4055 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4056 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4057 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4058 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4059 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4060 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4061 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4062 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4063 * 4064 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4065 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4066 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4067 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4068 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4069 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4070 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4071 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4072 * 4073 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4074 * This callback may sleep. 4075 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4076 * This callback may sleep. 4077 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4078 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4079 * channel context with different settings 4080 * This callback may sleep. 4081 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4082 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4083 * This callback may sleep. 4084 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4085 * unbound from vif. 4086 * This callback may sleep. 4087 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4088 * another, as specified in the list of 4089 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4090 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4091 * This callback may sleep. 4092 * 4093 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4094 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4095 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4096 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4097 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4098 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4099 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4100 * 4101 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4102 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4103 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4104 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4105 * This callback may sleep. 4106 * 4107 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4108 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4109 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4110 * 4111 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4112 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4113 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4114 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4115 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4116 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4117 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4118 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4119 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4120 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4121 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4122 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4123 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4124 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4125 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4126 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4127 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4128 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4129 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 4130 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4131 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4132 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4133 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4134 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4135 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4136 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4137 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4138 * 4139 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4140 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4141 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4142 * 4143 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4144 * and hardware limits. 4145 * 4146 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4147 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4148 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4149 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4150 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4151 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4152 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4153 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4154 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4155 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4156 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4157 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4158 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4159 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4160 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4161 * the function call. 4162 * 4163 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4164 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4165 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4166 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4167 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4168 * 4169 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4170 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4171 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4172 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4173 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4174 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4175 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4176 * changed parameters. 4177 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4178 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4179 * this call. 4180 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4181 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4182 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4183 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4184 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4185 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4186 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4187 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4188 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4189 * 4190 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4191 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4192 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4193 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4194 * This callback may sleep. 4195 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4196 * This callback may sleep. 4197 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4198 * 4-address mode 4199 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4200 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4201 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4202 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4203 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4204 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4205 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4206 * twt structure. 4207 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4208 * from the peer. 4209 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4210 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4211 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4212 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4213 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4214 * radar channel. 4215 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4216 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4217 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4218 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4219 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4220 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4221 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4222 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4223 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4224 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4225 * This callback can sleep. 4226 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4227 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4228 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4229 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4230 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4231 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4232 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4233 * that. 4234 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4235 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4236 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4237 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4238 */ 4239 struct ieee80211_ops { 4240 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4241 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4242 struct sk_buff *skb); 4243 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4244 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4245 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4246 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4247 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4248 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4249 #endif 4250 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4251 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4252 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4254 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4255 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4256 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4257 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4258 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4260 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4261 u64 changed); 4262 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4263 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4264 u64 changed); 4265 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4266 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4267 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4268 u64 changed); 4269 4270 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4271 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4272 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4273 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4274 4275 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4276 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4277 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4278 unsigned int changed_flags, 4279 unsigned int *total_flags, 4280 u64 multicast); 4281 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4282 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4283 unsigned int filter_flags, 4284 unsigned int changed_flags); 4285 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4286 bool set); 4287 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4289 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4290 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4291 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4292 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4293 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4294 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4295 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4296 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4297 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4298 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4299 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4300 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4301 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4302 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4303 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4304 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4305 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4306 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4307 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4308 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4310 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4311 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4312 const u8 *mac_addr); 4313 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4315 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4316 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4317 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4318 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4319 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4320 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4321 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4322 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4323 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4324 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4325 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4326 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4327 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4328 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4329 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4330 struct dentry *dir); 4331 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4332 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4333 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4334 struct dentry *dir); 4335 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4336 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4337 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4338 struct dentry *dir); 4339 #endif 4340 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4341 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4342 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4343 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4344 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4345 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4347 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4348 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4349 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4351 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4352 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4354 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4355 u32 changed); 4356 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4357 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4358 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4359 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4360 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4361 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4362 struct station_info *sinfo); 4363 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4364 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4365 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4366 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4367 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4368 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4369 u64 tsf); 4370 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4371 s64 offset); 4372 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4373 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4374 4375 /** 4376 * @ampdu_action: 4377 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4378 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4379 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4380 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4381 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4382 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4383 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4384 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4385 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4386 * 4387 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4388 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4389 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4390 * 4391 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4392 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4393 * 4394 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4395 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4396 * - ``TX: 81`` 4397 * 4398 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4399 * 4400 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4401 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4402 * if the session can start immediately. 4403 * 4404 * The callback can sleep. 4405 */ 4406 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4408 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4409 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4410 struct survey_info *survey); 4411 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4412 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4413 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4414 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4415 void *data, int len); 4416 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4417 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4418 void *data, int len); 4419 #endif 4420 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4421 u32 queues, bool drop); 4422 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4423 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4424 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4425 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4426 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4427 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4428 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4429 4430 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4431 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4432 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4433 int duration, 4434 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4435 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4437 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4438 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4439 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4440 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4441 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4442 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4443 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4444 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4445 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4446 4447 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4449 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4450 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4451 bool more_data); 4452 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4453 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4454 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4455 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4456 bool more_data); 4457 4458 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4459 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4460 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4461 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4462 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4463 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4465 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4466 4467 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4468 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4469 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4470 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4472 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4473 4474 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4476 4477 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4478 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4479 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4480 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4481 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4482 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4483 u32 changed); 4484 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4486 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4487 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4488 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4490 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4491 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4492 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4493 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4494 int n_vifs, 4495 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4496 4497 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4498 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4499 4500 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4501 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4503 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4504 #endif 4505 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4507 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4508 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4510 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4511 4512 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4514 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4516 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4518 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4519 4520 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4521 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4522 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4523 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4524 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4525 int *dbm); 4526 4527 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4529 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4530 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4531 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4532 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4533 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4534 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4535 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4536 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4537 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4538 4539 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4540 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4541 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4542 4543 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4545 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4546 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4547 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4548 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4549 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4550 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4551 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4552 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4553 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4554 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4556 u8 instance_id); 4557 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4558 struct sk_buff *head, 4559 struct sk_buff *skb); 4560 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4561 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4562 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4563 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4564 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4565 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4566 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4567 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4568 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4569 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4570 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4571 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4572 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4573 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4574 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4575 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4576 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4577 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4578 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4579 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4580 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4581 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4582 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4583 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4584 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4585 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4586 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4587 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4588 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4589 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4590 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4592 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4593 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4594 struct net_device_path *path); 4595 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4596 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4597 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4598 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4599 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4600 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4601 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4602 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4603 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4604 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4605 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 4606 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4608 struct net_device *dev, 4609 enum tc_setup_type type, 4610 void *type_data); 4611 }; 4612 4613 /** 4614 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4615 * 4616 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4617 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4618 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4619 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4620 * @priv_data_len. 4621 * 4622 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4623 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4624 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4625 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4626 * 4627 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4628 */ 4629 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4630 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4631 const char *requested_name); 4632 4633 /** 4634 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4635 * 4636 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4637 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4638 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4639 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4640 * @priv_data_len. 4641 * 4642 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4643 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4644 * 4645 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4646 */ 4647 static inline 4648 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4649 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4650 { 4651 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4652 } 4653 4654 /** 4655 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4656 * 4657 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4658 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4659 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4660 * 4661 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4662 * 4663 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4664 */ 4665 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4666 4667 /** 4668 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4669 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4670 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4671 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4672 */ 4673 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4674 int throughput; 4675 int blink_time; 4676 }; 4677 4678 /** 4679 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4680 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4681 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4682 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4683 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4684 */ 4685 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4686 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4687 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4688 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4689 }; 4690 4691 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4692 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4693 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4694 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4695 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4696 const char * 4697 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4698 unsigned int flags, 4699 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4700 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4701 #endif 4702 /** 4703 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4704 * 4705 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4706 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4707 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4708 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4709 * 4710 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4711 * 4712 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4713 */ 4714 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4715 { 4716 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4717 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4718 #else 4719 return NULL; 4720 #endif 4721 } 4722 4723 /** 4724 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4725 * 4726 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4727 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4728 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4729 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4730 * 4731 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4732 * 4733 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4734 */ 4735 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4736 { 4737 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4738 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4739 #else 4740 return NULL; 4741 #endif 4742 } 4743 4744 /** 4745 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4746 * 4747 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4748 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4749 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4750 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4751 * 4752 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4753 * 4754 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4755 */ 4756 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4757 { 4758 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4759 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4760 #else 4761 return NULL; 4762 #endif 4763 } 4764 4765 /** 4766 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4767 * 4768 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4769 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4770 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4771 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4772 * 4773 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4774 * 4775 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4776 */ 4777 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4778 { 4779 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4780 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4781 #else 4782 return NULL; 4783 #endif 4784 } 4785 4786 /** 4787 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4788 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4789 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4790 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4791 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4792 * 4793 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4794 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4795 * 4796 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4797 */ 4798 static inline const char * 4799 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4800 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4801 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4802 { 4803 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4804 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4805 blink_table_len); 4806 #else 4807 return NULL; 4808 #endif 4809 } 4810 4811 /** 4812 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4813 * 4814 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4815 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4816 * 4817 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4818 */ 4819 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4820 4821 /** 4822 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4823 * 4824 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4825 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4826 * before calling this function. 4827 * 4828 * @hw: the hardware to free 4829 */ 4830 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4831 4832 /** 4833 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4834 * 4835 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4836 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4837 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4838 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4839 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4840 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4841 * 4842 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4843 */ 4844 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4845 4846 /** 4847 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4848 * 4849 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4850 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4851 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4852 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4853 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4854 * 4855 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4856 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4857 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4858 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4859 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4860 * 4861 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4862 * 4863 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4864 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4865 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4866 * @list: the destination list 4867 */ 4868 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4869 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4870 4871 /** 4872 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4873 * 4874 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4875 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4876 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4877 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4878 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4879 * 4880 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4881 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4882 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4883 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4884 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4885 * 4886 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4887 * 4888 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4889 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4890 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4891 * @napi: the NAPI context 4892 */ 4893 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4894 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4895 4896 /** 4897 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4898 * 4899 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4900 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4901 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4902 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4903 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4904 * 4905 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4906 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4907 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4908 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4909 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4910 * 4911 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4912 * 4913 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4914 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4915 */ 4916 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4917 { 4918 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4919 } 4920 4921 /** 4922 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4923 * 4924 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4925 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4926 * 4927 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4928 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4929 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4930 * 4931 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4932 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4933 */ 4934 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4935 4936 /** 4937 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4938 * 4939 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4940 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4941 * 4942 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4943 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4944 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4945 * 4946 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4947 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4948 */ 4949 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4950 struct sk_buff *skb) 4951 { 4952 local_bh_disable(); 4953 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4954 local_bh_enable(); 4955 } 4956 4957 /** 4958 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4959 * 4960 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4961 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4962 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4963 * 4964 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4965 * 4966 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4967 * each other. 4968 * 4969 * @sta: currently connected sta 4970 * @start: start or stop PS 4971 * 4972 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4973 */ 4974 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4975 4976 /** 4977 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4978 * (in process context) 4979 * 4980 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4981 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4982 * applies. 4983 * 4984 * @sta: currently connected sta 4985 * @start: start or stop PS 4986 * 4987 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4988 */ 4989 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4990 bool start) 4991 { 4992 int ret; 4993 4994 local_bh_disable(); 4995 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4996 local_bh_enable(); 4997 4998 return ret; 4999 } 5000 5001 /** 5002 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5003 * @sta: currently connected station 5004 * 5005 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5006 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5007 * connected station was received. 5008 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5009 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5010 * be serialized. 5011 */ 5012 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5013 5014 /** 5015 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5016 * @sta: currently connected station 5017 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5018 * 5019 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5020 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5021 * from a connected station was received. 5022 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5023 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5024 * serialized. 5025 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5026 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5027 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5028 * checks. 5029 */ 5030 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5031 5032 /* 5033 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5034 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5035 */ 5036 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5037 5038 /** 5039 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5040 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5041 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5042 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5043 * 5044 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5045 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5046 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5047 * 5048 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5049 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5050 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5051 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5052 * 5053 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5054 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5055 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5056 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5057 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5058 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5059 * 5060 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5061 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5062 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5063 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5064 * use this API. 5065 */ 5066 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5067 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5068 5069 /** 5070 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5071 * 5072 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5073 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5074 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5075 * 5076 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5077 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5078 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5079 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5080 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5081 */ 5082 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5083 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5084 struct sk_buff *skb, 5085 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5086 int max_rates); 5087 5088 /** 5089 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5090 * 5091 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5092 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5093 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5094 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5095 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5096 * slow stations to starve). 5097 * 5098 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5099 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5100 */ 5101 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5102 u32 thr); 5103 5104 /** 5105 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5106 * 5107 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5108 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5109 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5110 * 5111 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5112 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5113 * @info: tx status information 5114 */ 5115 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5116 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5117 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5118 5119 /** 5120 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 5121 * 5122 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5123 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5124 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5125 * 5126 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5127 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5128 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5129 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5130 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5131 * 5132 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5133 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5134 */ 5135 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5136 struct sk_buff *skb); 5137 5138 /** 5139 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5140 * 5141 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5142 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5143 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5144 * 5145 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5146 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5147 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5148 * 5149 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5150 * @status: tx status information 5151 */ 5152 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5153 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5154 5155 /** 5156 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5157 * 5158 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5159 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5160 * specific skbs. 5161 * 5162 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5163 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5164 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5165 * 5166 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5167 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5168 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5169 * @info: tx status information 5170 */ 5171 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5172 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5173 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5174 { 5175 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5176 .sta = sta, 5177 .info = info, 5178 }; 5179 5180 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5181 } 5182 5183 /** 5184 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5185 * 5186 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 5187 * 5188 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5189 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5190 * for a single hardware. 5191 * 5192 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5193 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5194 */ 5195 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5196 struct sk_buff *skb) 5197 { 5198 local_bh_disable(); 5199 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 5200 local_bh_enable(); 5201 } 5202 5203 /** 5204 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5205 * 5206 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 5207 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5208 * 5209 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5210 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5211 * 5212 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5213 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5214 */ 5215 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5216 struct sk_buff *skb); 5217 5218 /** 5219 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5220 * 5221 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5222 * connected STA. 5223 * 5224 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5225 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5226 */ 5227 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5228 5229 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5230 5231 /** 5232 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5233 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5234 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5235 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5236 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5237 * should be ignored. 5238 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5239 */ 5240 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5241 u16 tim_offset; 5242 u16 tim_length; 5243 5244 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5245 u16 mbssid_off; 5246 }; 5247 5248 /** 5249 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5250 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5251 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5252 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5253 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5254 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5255 * 5256 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5257 * obtain the beacon template. 5258 * 5259 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5260 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5261 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5262 * applicable, the CSA count. 5263 * 5264 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5265 * 5266 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5267 */ 5268 struct sk_buff * 5269 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5271 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5272 unsigned int link_id); 5273 5274 /** 5275 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5276 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5277 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5278 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5279 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5280 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5281 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5282 * 5283 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5284 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5285 * requested index. 5286 * 5287 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5288 */ 5289 struct sk_buff * 5290 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5291 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5292 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5293 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5294 5295 /** 5296 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5297 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5298 * 5299 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5300 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5301 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5302 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5303 */ 5304 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5305 u8 cnt; 5306 struct { 5307 struct sk_buff *skb; 5308 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5309 } bcn[]; 5310 }; 5311 5312 /** 5313 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5314 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5315 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5316 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5317 * 5318 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5319 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5320 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5321 * one multiple BSSID element. 5322 * 5323 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5324 * 5325 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5326 * %NULL on error. 5327 */ 5328 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5329 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5331 unsigned int link_id); 5332 5333 /** 5334 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5335 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5336 * 5337 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5338 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5339 */ 5340 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5341 5342 /** 5343 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5344 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5345 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5346 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5347 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5348 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5349 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5350 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5351 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5352 * 5353 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5354 * obtain the beacon frame. 5355 * 5356 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5357 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5358 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5359 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5360 * 5361 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5362 * 5363 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5364 */ 5365 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5366 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5367 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5368 unsigned int link_id); 5369 5370 /** 5371 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5372 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5373 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5374 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5375 * 5376 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5377 * 5378 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5379 */ 5380 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5381 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5382 unsigned int link_id) 5383 { 5384 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5385 } 5386 5387 /** 5388 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5389 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5390 * 5391 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5392 * This function is called implicitly when 5393 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5394 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5395 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5396 * 5397 * Return: new countdown value 5398 */ 5399 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5400 5401 /** 5402 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5404 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5405 * 5406 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5407 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5408 * 5409 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5410 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5411 */ 5412 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5413 5414 /** 5415 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5416 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5417 * 5418 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5419 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5420 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5421 */ 5422 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5423 5424 /** 5425 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5426 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5427 * 5428 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 5429 */ 5430 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5431 5432 /** 5433 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5434 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5435 * 5436 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5437 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5438 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5439 */ 5440 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5441 5442 /** 5443 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5444 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5445 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5446 * 5447 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5448 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5449 * 5450 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5451 * 5452 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5453 */ 5454 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5455 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5456 5457 /** 5458 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5459 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5460 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5461 * 5462 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5463 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5464 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5465 * 5466 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5467 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5468 * 5469 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5470 */ 5471 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5472 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5473 5474 /** 5475 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5476 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5477 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5478 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5479 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5480 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5481 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5482 * if at all possible 5483 * 5484 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5485 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5486 * BSSID and address is used. 5487 * 5488 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5489 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5490 * 5491 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5492 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5493 * 5494 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5495 */ 5496 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5498 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5499 5500 /** 5501 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5502 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5503 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5504 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5505 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5506 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5507 * 5508 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5509 * hardware. 5510 * 5511 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5512 */ 5513 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5514 const u8 *src_addr, 5515 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5516 size_t tailroom); 5517 5518 /** 5519 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5520 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5521 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5522 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5523 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5524 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5525 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5526 * 5527 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5528 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5529 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5530 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5531 */ 5532 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5533 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5534 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5535 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5536 5537 /** 5538 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5539 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5540 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5541 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5542 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5543 * 5544 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5545 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5546 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5547 * 5548 * Return: The duration. 5549 */ 5550 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5551 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5552 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5553 5554 /** 5555 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5556 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5557 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5558 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5559 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5560 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5561 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5562 * 5563 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5564 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5565 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5566 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5567 */ 5568 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5570 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5571 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5572 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5573 5574 /** 5575 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5576 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5577 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5578 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5579 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5580 * 5581 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5582 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5583 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5584 * 5585 * Return: The duration. 5586 */ 5587 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5589 size_t frame_len, 5590 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5591 5592 /** 5593 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5594 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5595 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5596 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5597 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5598 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5599 * 5600 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5601 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5602 * 5603 * Return: The duration. 5604 */ 5605 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5607 enum nl80211_band band, 5608 size_t frame_len, 5609 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5610 5611 /** 5612 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5613 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5614 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5615 * 5616 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5617 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5618 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5619 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5620 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5621 * 5622 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5623 * frames are available. 5624 * 5625 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5626 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5627 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5628 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5629 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5630 * use common code for all beacons. 5631 */ 5632 struct sk_buff * 5633 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5634 5635 /** 5636 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5637 * 5638 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5639 * 5640 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5641 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5642 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5643 */ 5644 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5645 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5646 5647 /** 5648 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5649 * 5650 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5651 * from the given packet. 5652 * 5653 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5654 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5655 * with this P1K 5656 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5657 */ 5658 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5659 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5660 { 5661 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5662 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5663 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5664 5665 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5666 } 5667 5668 /** 5669 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5670 * 5671 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5672 * and transmitter address. 5673 * 5674 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5675 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5676 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5677 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5678 */ 5679 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5680 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5681 5682 /** 5683 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5684 * 5685 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5686 * in the packet. 5687 * 5688 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5689 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5690 * encrypted with this key 5691 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5692 */ 5693 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5694 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5695 5696 /** 5697 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5698 * 5699 * @pos: start of crypto header 5700 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5701 * @pn: PN to add 5702 * 5703 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5704 * the packet payload) 5705 * 5706 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5707 * point to the crypto header) 5708 */ 5709 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5710 5711 /** 5712 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5713 * 5714 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5715 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5716 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5717 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5718 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5719 * 5720 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5721 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5722 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5723 * 5724 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5725 * can be done concurrently. 5726 */ 5727 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5728 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5729 5730 /** 5731 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5732 * 5733 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5734 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5735 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5736 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5737 * @seq: new sequence data 5738 * 5739 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5740 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5741 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5742 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5743 * 5744 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5745 * can be done concurrently. 5746 */ 5747 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5748 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5749 5750 /** 5751 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5752 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5753 * 5754 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5755 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5756 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5757 * 5758 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5759 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5760 */ 5761 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5762 5763 /** 5764 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5765 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5766 * @keyconf: new key data 5767 * 5768 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5769 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5770 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5771 * 5772 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5773 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5774 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5775 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5776 * 5777 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5778 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5779 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5780 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5781 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5782 * of the reconfiguration. 5783 * 5784 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5785 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5786 * 5787 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5788 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5789 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5790 * the key that's being replaced. 5791 */ 5792 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5793 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5794 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5795 5796 /** 5797 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5798 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5799 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5800 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5801 * @gfp: allocation flags 5802 */ 5803 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5804 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5805 5806 /** 5807 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5808 * 5809 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5810 * at the same time. 5811 * 5812 * @keyconf: the key in question 5813 */ 5814 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5815 5816 /** 5817 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5818 * 5819 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5820 * at the same time. 5821 * 5822 * @keyconf: the key in question 5823 */ 5824 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5825 5826 /** 5827 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5828 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5829 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5830 * 5831 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5832 */ 5833 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5834 5835 /** 5836 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5837 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5838 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5839 * 5840 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5841 */ 5842 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5843 5844 /** 5845 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5846 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5847 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5848 * 5849 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 5850 * 5851 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5852 */ 5853 5854 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5855 5856 /** 5857 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5858 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5859 * 5860 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 5861 */ 5862 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5863 5864 /** 5865 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5866 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5867 * 5868 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 5869 */ 5870 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5871 5872 /** 5873 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5874 * 5875 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5876 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5877 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5878 * any context, including hardirq context. 5879 * 5880 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5881 * @info: information about the completed scan 5882 */ 5883 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5884 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5885 5886 /** 5887 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5888 * 5889 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5890 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5891 * 5892 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5893 */ 5894 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5895 5896 /** 5897 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5898 * 5899 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5900 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5901 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5902 * while associating, for instance. 5903 * 5904 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5905 */ 5906 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5907 5908 /** 5909 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5910 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5911 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5912 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5913 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5914 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5915 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5916 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5917 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5918 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5919 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5920 * for instance. 5921 */ 5922 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5923 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5924 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5925 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5926 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5927 }; 5928 5929 /** 5930 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5931 * 5932 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5933 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5934 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5935 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5936 * 5937 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5938 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5939 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5940 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5941 */ 5942 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5943 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5945 void *data); 5946 5947 /** 5948 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5949 * 5950 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5951 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5952 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5953 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5954 * be used. 5955 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5956 * 5957 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5958 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5959 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5960 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5961 */ 5962 static inline void 5963 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5964 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5966 void *data) 5967 { 5968 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5969 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5970 iterator, data); 5971 } 5972 5973 /** 5974 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5975 * 5976 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5977 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5978 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5979 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5980 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5981 * 5982 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5983 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5984 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5985 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5986 */ 5987 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5988 u32 iter_flags, 5989 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5990 u8 *mac, 5991 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5992 void *data); 5993 5994 /** 5995 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 5996 * 5997 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5998 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5999 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6000 * 6001 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6002 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6003 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6004 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6005 */ 6006 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6007 u32 iter_flags, 6008 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6009 u8 *mac, 6010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6011 void *data); 6012 6013 /** 6014 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6015 * 6016 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6017 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6018 * function for them. 6019 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6020 * 6021 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6022 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6023 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6024 */ 6025 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6026 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6027 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6028 void *data); 6029 /** 6030 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6031 * 6032 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6033 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6034 * 6035 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6036 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6037 */ 6038 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6039 6040 /** 6041 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6042 * 6043 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6044 * workqueue. 6045 * 6046 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6047 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6048 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6049 */ 6050 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6051 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6052 unsigned long delay); 6053 6054 /** 6055 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6056 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6057 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6058 * 6059 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6060 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6061 * mac80211. 6062 * 6063 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6064 */ 6065 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6066 u16 tid); 6067 6068 /** 6069 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6070 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6071 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6072 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6073 * 6074 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6075 * 6076 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6077 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6078 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6079 */ 6080 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6081 u16 timeout); 6082 6083 /** 6084 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6085 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6086 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6087 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6088 * 6089 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6090 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6091 * from any context. 6092 */ 6093 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6094 u16 tid); 6095 6096 /** 6097 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6098 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6099 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6100 * 6101 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6102 * 6103 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6104 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6105 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6106 */ 6107 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6108 6109 /** 6110 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6111 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6112 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6113 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6114 * 6115 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6116 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6117 * can be called from any context. 6118 */ 6119 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6120 u16 tid); 6121 6122 /** 6123 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6124 * 6125 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6126 * @addr: station's address 6127 * 6128 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6129 * 6130 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6131 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6132 */ 6133 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6134 const u8 *addr); 6135 6136 /** 6137 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6138 * 6139 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6140 * @addr: remote station's address 6141 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6142 * 6143 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6144 * 6145 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6146 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6147 * 6148 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6149 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6150 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6151 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6152 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6153 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6154 * is not reliable. 6155 * 6156 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6157 */ 6158 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6159 const u8 *addr, 6160 const u8 *localaddr); 6161 6162 /** 6163 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6164 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6165 * @addr: remote station's link address 6166 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6167 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6168 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6169 * 6170 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6171 */ 6172 struct ieee80211_sta * 6173 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6174 const u8 *addr, 6175 const u8 *localaddr, 6176 unsigned int *link_id); 6177 6178 /** 6179 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6180 * @hw: the hardware 6181 * @pubsta: the station 6182 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6183 * 6184 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6185 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6186 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6187 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6188 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6189 * 6190 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6191 * manner. 6192 * 6193 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6194 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6195 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6196 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6197 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6198 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6199 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6200 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6201 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6202 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6203 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6204 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6205 * woke up while blocked or not. 6206 */ 6207 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6208 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6209 6210 /** 6211 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6212 * @pubsta: the station 6213 * 6214 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6215 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6216 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6217 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6218 * 6219 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6220 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6221 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6222 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6223 * 6224 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6225 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6226 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6227 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6228 */ 6229 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6230 6231 /** 6232 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6233 * @pubsta: the station 6234 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6235 * 6236 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6237 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6238 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6239 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6240 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6241 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6242 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6243 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6244 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6245 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6246 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6247 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6248 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6249 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6250 */ 6251 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6252 6253 /** 6254 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6255 * @pubsta: the station 6256 * 6257 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6258 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6259 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6260 * 6261 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6262 * there is no need to call this function. 6263 */ 6264 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6265 6266 /** 6267 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6268 * 6269 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6270 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6271 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6272 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6273 * 6274 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6275 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6276 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6277 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6278 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6279 * attempts. 6280 * 6281 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6282 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6283 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6284 * them to 0. 6285 * 6286 * @pubsta: the station 6287 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6288 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6289 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6290 */ 6291 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6292 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6293 6294 /** 6295 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6296 * 6297 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6298 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6299 * 6300 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6301 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 6302 */ 6303 bool 6304 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6305 6306 /** 6307 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6308 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6309 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6310 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6311 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6312 * 6313 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6314 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6315 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6316 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 6317 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 6318 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 6319 * 6320 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6321 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6322 * set_key callback. 6323 */ 6324 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6325 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6326 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6327 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6328 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6329 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6330 void *data), 6331 void *iter_data); 6332 6333 /** 6334 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6335 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6336 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6337 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6338 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6339 * 6340 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6341 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6342 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6343 * in removal process will be skipped. 6344 * 6345 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6346 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6347 */ 6348 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6349 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6350 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6351 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6352 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6353 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6354 void *data), 6355 void *iter_data); 6356 6357 /** 6358 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6359 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6360 * @iter: iterator function 6361 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6362 * 6363 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6364 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6365 * places while calling into the driver. 6366 * 6367 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6368 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6369 * removed. 6370 * 6371 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6372 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6373 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6374 * or not. 6375 */ 6376 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6377 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6378 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6379 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6380 void *data), 6381 void *iter_data); 6382 6383 /** 6384 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6385 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6386 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6387 * 6388 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6389 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6390 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6391 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6392 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6393 * %NULL. 6394 * 6395 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6396 */ 6397 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6398 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6399 6400 /** 6401 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6402 * 6403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6404 * 6405 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6406 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6407 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6408 */ 6409 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6410 6411 /** 6412 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6413 * 6414 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6415 * 6416 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6417 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6418 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6419 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6420 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6421 * 6422 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6423 * without connection recovery attempts. 6424 */ 6425 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6426 6427 /** 6428 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6429 * 6430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6431 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6432 * 6433 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6434 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6435 */ 6436 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6437 6438 /** 6439 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6440 * 6441 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6442 * 6443 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6444 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6445 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6446 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6447 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6448 * 6449 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6450 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6451 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6452 * disconnect normally later. 6453 * 6454 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6455 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6456 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6457 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6458 */ 6459 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6460 6461 /** 6462 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6463 * hardware restart 6464 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6465 * 6466 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6467 * hardware restart. 6468 */ 6469 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6470 6471 /** 6472 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6473 * rssi threshold triggered 6474 * 6475 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6476 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6477 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6478 * @gfp: context flags 6479 * 6480 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6481 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6482 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6483 */ 6484 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6485 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6486 s32 rssi_level, 6487 gfp_t gfp); 6488 6489 /** 6490 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6491 * 6492 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6493 * @gfp: context flags 6494 */ 6495 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6496 6497 /** 6498 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6499 * 6500 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6501 */ 6502 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6503 6504 /** 6505 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6506 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6507 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6508 * 6509 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6510 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6511 */ 6512 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 6513 6514 /** 6515 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6516 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6517 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame. 6518 * 6519 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6520 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6521 * a deauth frame in this case. 6522 */ 6523 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6524 bool block_tx); 6525 6526 /** 6527 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6528 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6529 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6530 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6531 * 6532 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6533 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6534 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6535 */ 6536 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6537 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6538 6539 /** 6540 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6541 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6542 */ 6543 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6544 6545 /** 6546 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6547 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6548 */ 6549 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6550 6551 /** 6552 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6553 * 6554 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6555 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6556 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6557 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6558 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6559 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6560 * 6561 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6562 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6563 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6564 */ 6565 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6566 const u8 *addr); 6567 6568 /** 6569 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6570 * @pubsta: station struct 6571 * @tid: the session's TID 6572 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6573 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6574 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6575 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6576 * 6577 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6578 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6579 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6580 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6581 */ 6582 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6583 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6584 u16 received_mpdus); 6585 6586 /** 6587 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6588 * 6589 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6590 * buffer. 6591 * 6592 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6593 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6594 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6595 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6596 */ 6597 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6598 6599 /** 6600 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6601 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6602 * @addr: station mac address 6603 * @tid: the rx tid 6604 */ 6605 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6606 unsigned int tid); 6607 6608 /** 6609 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6610 * 6611 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6612 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6613 * reordering. 6614 * 6615 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6616 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6617 * 6618 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6619 * @addr: station mac address 6620 * @tid: the rx tid 6621 */ 6622 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6623 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6624 { 6625 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6626 return; 6627 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6628 } 6629 6630 /** 6631 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6632 * 6633 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6634 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6635 * reordering. 6636 * 6637 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6638 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6639 * 6640 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6641 * @addr: station mac address 6642 * @tid: the rx tid 6643 */ 6644 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6645 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6646 { 6647 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6648 return; 6649 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6650 } 6651 6652 /** 6653 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6654 * 6655 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6656 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6657 * 6658 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6659 * 6660 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6661 * @addr: station mac address 6662 * @tid: the rx tid 6663 */ 6664 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6665 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6666 6667 /* Rate control API */ 6668 6669 /** 6670 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6671 * 6672 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6673 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6674 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6675 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6676 * to be filled in 6677 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6678 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6679 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6680 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6681 * RTS threshold 6682 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6683 * if the selected rate supports it 6684 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6685 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6686 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6687 */ 6688 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6689 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6690 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6691 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6692 struct sk_buff *skb; 6693 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6694 bool rts, short_preamble; 6695 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6696 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6697 bool bss; 6698 }; 6699 6700 /** 6701 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6702 */ 6703 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6704 /** 6705 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6706 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6707 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6708 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6709 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6710 */ 6711 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6712 /** 6713 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6714 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6715 */ 6716 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 6717 }; 6718 6719 struct rate_control_ops { 6720 unsigned long capa; 6721 const char *name; 6722 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6723 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6724 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6725 void (*free)(void *priv); 6726 6727 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6728 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6729 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6730 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6731 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6732 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6733 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6734 u32 changed); 6735 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6736 void *priv_sta); 6737 6738 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6739 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6740 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6741 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6742 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6743 struct sk_buff *skb); 6744 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6745 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6746 6747 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6748 struct dentry *dir); 6749 6750 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6751 }; 6752 6753 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6754 enum nl80211_band band, 6755 int index) 6756 { 6757 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6758 } 6759 6760 static inline s8 6761 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6762 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6763 { 6764 int i; 6765 6766 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6767 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6768 return i; 6769 6770 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6771 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6772 6773 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6774 return 0; 6775 } 6776 6777 static inline 6778 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6779 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6780 { 6781 unsigned int i; 6782 6783 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6784 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6785 return true; 6786 return false; 6787 } 6788 6789 /** 6790 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6791 * 6792 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6793 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6794 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6795 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6796 * 6797 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6798 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6799 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6800 */ 6801 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6802 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6803 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6804 6805 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6806 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6807 6808 static inline bool 6809 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6810 { 6811 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6812 } 6813 6814 static inline bool 6815 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6816 { 6817 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6818 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6819 } 6820 6821 static inline bool 6822 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6823 { 6824 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6825 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6826 } 6827 6828 static inline bool 6829 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6830 { 6831 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6832 } 6833 6834 static inline bool 6835 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6836 { 6837 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6838 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6839 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6840 } 6841 6842 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6843 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6844 { 6845 if (p2p) { 6846 switch (type) { 6847 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6848 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6849 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6850 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6851 default: 6852 break; 6853 } 6854 } 6855 return type; 6856 } 6857 6858 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6859 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6860 { 6861 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6862 } 6863 6864 /** 6865 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6866 * 6867 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6868 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 6869 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6870 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6871 * 6872 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6873 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6874 * matching GroupId management frame. 6875 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6876 */ 6877 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6878 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6879 6880 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6881 int rssi_min_thold, 6882 int rssi_max_thold); 6883 6884 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6885 6886 /** 6887 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6888 * 6889 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6890 * 6891 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6892 * 6893 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6894 * applicable. 6895 */ 6896 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6897 6898 /** 6899 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6900 * @vif: virtual interface 6901 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6902 * @gfp: allocation flags 6903 * 6904 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6905 */ 6906 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6907 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6908 gfp_t gfp); 6909 6910 /** 6911 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6912 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6913 * @vif: virtual interface 6914 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6915 * @band: the band to transmit on 6916 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6917 * 6918 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6919 */ 6920 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6921 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6922 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6923 6924 /** 6925 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 6926 * of injected frames. 6927 * 6928 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 6929 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 6930 * of the skb before calling this function. 6931 * 6932 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6933 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6934 */ 6935 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6936 struct net_device *dev); 6937 6938 /** 6939 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6940 * 6941 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6942 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6943 * 6944 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6945 * 6946 * private: 6947 * 6948 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6949 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6950 */ 6951 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6952 u32 next_tsf; 6953 bool has_next_tsf; 6954 6955 u8 absent; 6956 6957 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6958 struct { 6959 u32 start; 6960 u32 duration; 6961 u32 interval; 6962 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6963 }; 6964 6965 /** 6966 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6967 * 6968 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6969 * @data: NoA tracking data 6970 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6971 * 6972 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6973 */ 6974 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6975 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6976 6977 /** 6978 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6979 * 6980 * @data: NoA tracking data 6981 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6982 */ 6983 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6984 6985 /** 6986 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6987 * @vif: virtual interface 6988 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6989 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6990 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6991 * @gfp: allocation flags 6992 * 6993 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6994 */ 6995 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6996 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6997 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6998 6999 /** 7000 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7001 * 7002 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7003 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7004 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7005 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7006 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7007 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7008 * 7009 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7010 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7011 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7012 * 7013 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7014 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7015 * 7016 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7017 */ 7018 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7019 7020 /** 7021 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7022 * 7023 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7024 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7025 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7026 * 7027 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7028 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7029 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7030 * 7031 * @sta: the station 7032 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7033 */ 7034 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7035 7036 /** 7037 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7038 * 7039 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7040 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7041 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7042 * 7043 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7044 * 7045 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7046 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7047 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7048 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7049 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7050 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7051 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7052 * 7053 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7054 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7055 */ 7056 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7057 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7058 7059 /** 7060 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7061 * (in process context) 7062 * 7063 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7064 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7065 * 7066 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7067 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7068 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7069 */ 7070 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7071 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7072 { 7073 struct sk_buff *skb; 7074 7075 local_bh_disable(); 7076 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7077 local_bh_enable(); 7078 7079 return skb; 7080 } 7081 7082 /** 7083 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7084 * 7085 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7086 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7087 * 7088 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7089 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7090 */ 7091 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7092 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7093 7094 /** 7095 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7096 * 7097 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7098 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7099 * 7100 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7101 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7102 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7103 */ 7104 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7105 7106 /** 7107 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7108 * 7109 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7110 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7111 * 7112 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7113 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7114 */ 7115 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7116 7117 /* (deprecated) */ 7118 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7119 { 7120 } 7121 7122 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7123 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7124 7125 /** 7126 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7127 * 7128 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7129 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7130 * 7131 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7132 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7133 * 7134 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7135 * this TXQ internally. 7136 */ 7137 static inline void 7138 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7139 { 7140 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7141 } 7142 7143 /** 7144 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7145 * 7146 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7147 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7148 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7149 * 7150 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7151 * internally. 7152 */ 7153 static inline void 7154 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7155 bool force) 7156 { 7157 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7158 } 7159 7160 /** 7161 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7162 * 7163 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7164 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7165 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 7166 * next_txq(). 7167 * 7168 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7169 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7170 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7171 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7172 * again. 7173 * 7174 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7175 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7176 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7177 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7178 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7179 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7180 * 7181 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7182 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7183 */ 7184 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7185 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7186 7187 /** 7188 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7189 * 7190 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7191 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7192 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7193 * 7194 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7195 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7196 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7197 */ 7198 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7199 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7200 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7201 7202 /** 7203 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7204 * 7205 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7206 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7207 * 7208 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7209 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7210 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7211 * @gfp: allocation flags 7212 */ 7213 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7214 u8 inst_id, 7215 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7216 gfp_t gfp); 7217 7218 /** 7219 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7220 * 7221 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7222 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7223 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7224 * 7225 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7226 * @match: match event information 7227 * @gfp: allocation flags 7228 */ 7229 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7230 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7231 gfp_t gfp); 7232 7233 /** 7234 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7235 * 7236 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7237 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7238 * 7239 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7240 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7241 * information. 7242 * @len: frame length in bytes 7243 */ 7244 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7245 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7246 int len); 7247 7248 /** 7249 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7250 * 7251 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7252 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7253 * 7254 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7255 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7256 * @len: frame length in bytes 7257 */ 7258 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7259 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7260 int len); 7261 /** 7262 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 7263 * 7264 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 7265 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 7266 * hardware or firmware. 7267 * 7268 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7269 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 7270 */ 7271 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 7272 7273 /** 7274 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7275 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7276 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7277 * 7278 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7279 * 7280 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7281 */ 7282 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7283 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7284 7285 /** 7286 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7287 * probe response template. 7288 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7289 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7290 * 7291 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7292 * 7293 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7294 */ 7295 struct sk_buff * 7296 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7297 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7298 7299 /** 7300 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7301 * collision. 7302 * 7303 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7304 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7305 * aware of. 7306 * @gfp: allocation flags 7307 */ 7308 void 7309 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7310 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp); 7311 7312 /** 7313 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7314 * 7315 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7316 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7317 * 7318 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7319 */ 7320 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7321 { 7322 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7323 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7324 7325 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7326 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7327 } 7328 7329 /** 7330 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7331 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7332 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7333 * 7334 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7335 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7336 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7337 * 7338 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7339 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7340 * a sequence of calls like 7341 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7342 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7343 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7344 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7345 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7346 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7347 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7348 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7349 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7350 * 7351 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not 7352 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a 7353 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks. 7354 */ 7355 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7356 7357 /** 7358 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7359 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7360 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7361 * 7362 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7363 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7364 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7365 * completed after it returns. 7366 */ 7367 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7368 u16 active_links); 7369 7370 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7371